Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. fixtures. and piping. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add more detailed modelling elements. Germany. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. and plumbing fixtures. such as duct. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.

NOTE Depending on your installation. Metric: files for users working with metric units. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and tags. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Create detail views. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . You do not design entire systems. After completing each exercise. views. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. to provide a richer and more finished design. annotations. you can choose to save your work. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. For example. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. however. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. When you open a training file. However. In this exercise. Metric file names have an _m suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. is located and accessed in the training files location. you learn where the training files are located. On the Contents tab. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Create schedules. such as templates and families. So. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. your Training folder may be in a different location. templates. and sheets to document the project. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. When you install the training files as instructed. when you add ductwork. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements.

Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 3 In the right pane. you are prompted to save the changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. if you open settings.rvt. select the folder in which to save the new file. verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected.rvt and make changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. scroll down. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. double-click Imperial or Metric. For Files of type. a list of file types displays. For example.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. You may close the file with or without saving changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Open. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. and click Save. 8 If you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. For File name. the Open dialog displays. and you can open any supported file type. 4 Click the training file name. click ➤ Save As. enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon. Accessing Training Files | 5 .

6 .

the hierarchy of elements. schedules. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedules required for a building project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the parameter is one of association or connection.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. You learn the terminology. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In the Revit MEP model. hence. quantities. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. ■ ■ 7 . Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. sections. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. and phases when you need it. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If you move the partition. every drawing sheet. drawing sheets. scope. and plans. drawings. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In this case.

tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components. sinks. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. filled regions. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Examples include detail lines. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. sprinklers. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. levels. For example. boilers. and electrical panels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . walls and ceilings are hosts. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. grids. ducts. dimensions. and keynotes are annotation elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. When you change something. and electrical panels. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. To place levels. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In other cases. programming is not required. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. from geometry to construction data. such as roofs. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. first floor. families. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. section views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. For example. and ceilings. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. The project file contains all information for the building design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. By using a single project file. This information includes components used to design the model. floors. Most often. elevation views. you can explicitly control them. for example. and types. and so forth). views of the project. and drawings of the design. Project: In Revit MEP. Often. If you can draw. North . you must be in a section or elevation view.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. schedules. top of wall. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. However.

such as a 30” X 42” title block. and similar graphical representation. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. A type can also be a style. and wires. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. showing. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties).Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A type can be a specific size of a family. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Then experiment with them. However. or layer the views to see only the one on top. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. With a few clicks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. hiding. pipes. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Unlike system and standard component families. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. System families include ducts. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. each in-place family contains only a single type. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.

or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

select the tool first. project and system parameters.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for adding 2D information to a design. architect-specific tools. When working on the Modify tab. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. data and systems. tools used for editing existing elements. then select what you want to modify. and settings. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. tools used for running analysis on the current design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and CAD files.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and for switching views.

a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. closes the application menu (double-click). The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. By default. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. For example. provides requested information. when adding duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools.

. (Export) On the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. such as Export and Publish. select a template and create a new drawing.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click. (Save As) export the current drawing.

family. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Licensing) close the file. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. To enable or disable a tool item. provides views including Default 3D..On the application menu. annotation. but is not enabled by default. or template file. or template file. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. to. (Print) access product and license information. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. click. saves a current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. and Walkthrough. Camera... publish the current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. annotation.

or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. To show the Status Bar again. when you switch to another editing mode. Clear the Status Bar check mark. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. workshared components. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.To undo or redo a series of operations. In addition. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. repeat the command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Modify. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. check the Status Bar. To hide the Status Bar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. This displays the command history in a list. Clipboard. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. However. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Group. When you are highlighting an element or component. or the Family Editor. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. When you are using a command.

To change existing elements to a different type. for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall. On the Quick Access toolbar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. In the following steps. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. After you are familiar with these tasks. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.

the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. To modify or add snap increments. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. on the Navigation bar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click . this is referred to as a crossing selection.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms in on the selected area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 6 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 . In the drawing area.

and then using the Zoom tool again. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. For more information about SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 14 To exit the wheel. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. ➤ Options. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.Design. display along the ends. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. and select the duct. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Small blue dots. Similar controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 . 2 Enter ZR.

Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. select the first item in the list. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. All changes you make to a project are tracked. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.3 Click and drag the bottom control. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. for example. Some commands. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . After selecting the element to move. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Press ESC twice. 14 Enter VG. Select Mechanical . Click OK.End a command Some commands. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 13 To end a command. For example.Return. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

The template selection may vary depending on your installation. create and manage views. 2 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 5 In the New Project dialog. settings. New projects inherit all the families.rte template. and loadable families. link files.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. In that case. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Finally. 27 . and geometry from the starting template. the default building levels and standard views. You can either select a template from the template library. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as the default project units and settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. select Project. system families. You can choose from several templates. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Browse. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Training files. 6 Click OK. and modify system settings. and click Open. such as coordination review and interference checking. under Create new. under Template file. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to start a project from a template. use copy/monitor.

7 In the Project Browser. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Level 1. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select School or University. Click Cancel. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Browse. If you want to use a template other than the default. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Click OK. NH. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For example. 10 Using the same method. under Energy Analysis. 8 In the drawing area. you can select it now. and open North. When you select the material. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. In the Choose Template dialog. (Browse). Click OK twice. for Energy Data. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.rte template and click Open. click Edit. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. create another new project using the Construction template. for City. ■ For Building Construction. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Project template. select Manchester. click (Browse). 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. navigate to Imperial Templates. review the construction materials listed. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. For Location.

23 In the left pane. 26 In the right pane. plumbing. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 22 In the right pane. Click OK twice. select Views. Holding CTRL. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. for 3 1/2". For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. 10 1/2". 4 1/2". click Rectangular. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and click Open. 33 Click OK. select Identity Data. click Wiring. under Duct Settings. for 3 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . For Ground Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and demand factors for electrical systems. 27 Click OK. and 12 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. under Duct Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. wiring.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 24 In the right pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 25 In the left pane. piping. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. click Sizes. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for 3/4". click Round. 4 1/2". 5 1/2". Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and 5 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. 11 1/2".

you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. sheets. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Linking Projects In this exercise. and groups that are contained in a project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 2 In the New Project dialog. Click Open. select Project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. select Family and Type. 38 Close the file. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.rvt. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Training. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. For Then by.Origin to Origin. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Create new. select Sub-Discipline. under Template file. From the Positioning list. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Auto . You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. In addition. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. click Browse. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Then by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Associated Level. families. select View Name. For Sort by. To enable this coordination. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click (Browse). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. templates. Load. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 15 Under Library Name. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click (Add Value). Save. and click Open. and click OK twice. click My Library. click the My Library icon. and change the name to My Library. ➤ Open. and select it as the library path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog.

7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area. custom color files. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Click Cancel. 9 In the text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. view the current path. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 11 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click the Spelling tab. If you want to relocate this path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. select Ignore words in uppercase. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 27 Click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. such as bump maps. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 3 Under Settings. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. This path is determined during installation. click Places. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. specify the new location here. 5 In the text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and decal image files. click Edit. click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 22 Select My Library. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 20 Click ➤ Options. If you work in a large office. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 12 Create a new project using the default template.

click Close. You can turn snap settings on and off. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK.. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 6 In the Snaps dialog. you modify snap settings. 21 Under Personal dictionary. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 18 Click ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. under Dimension Snaps. 22 In the text editor. and enter 1 . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 20 Under Settings. 23 In the text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 24 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 19 In the Options dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. delete sheetmtl-CU.17 In the Spelling dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. click Restore Defaults. click the Spelling tab. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. work with snapping turned off. click OK. click Edit. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap increments. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.

Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .7 Under Object Snaps. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. deselect Chain. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. While sketching. enter SM. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. For example. If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This is the increment that you added previously. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. click OK.

18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . with or without saving it. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Do not set the wall end point. the midpoint. 19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 25 Click OK.. 26 Close the file. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. it will snap to the endpoints. and the wall edges. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and delete the value 1’ . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

45 . you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. However. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you will understand the process. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and then you create a plenum level. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. water source heat pump (WSHP). you first plan the system. After finishing each exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you can choose to save your work. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the mechanical system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you first configure the linked architectural model. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you design a mechanical system for an office building.autodesk. At the end of the tutorial. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

click to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. In this section. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. NOTE When working with a linked file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.rvt. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. select Room Bounding. roof. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. Next. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. click Training Files. not in the MEP training file. you add a level for plenums. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ceilings. and click OK. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and after the linked model highlights.

14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and click OK. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.MEP. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and enter Level 2 Plenum. and double-click West . Click Plan View Types. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 9 On the Draw panel. and in the Plan View Types dialog.6 In the Project Browser. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. For Offset. The new level is placed. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. enter 8'.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Preparing Spaces | 47 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP .

21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Level. In the next exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). for View Range. enter 0. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For Cut plane. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. right-click Level 2 Plenum. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Under View Depth.Plenum. select MEP . select Plenum Plan. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for View Scale. click Edit. for Top. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Identity Data. In this exercise. and for Offset. for Default View Template. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 20 In the Project Browser. select Design. ■ Click OK twice. Under Extents. For View Classification. In this exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Apply Default View Template. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. enter an Offset of 1' 0". NOTE After finishing each exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and click Properties.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. However. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you can choose to save your work. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. For Upper Limit. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select Level 2 Plenum. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. walls.Space Plan is highlighted. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Horizontal. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Offset. select New. click Training Files. For Space. For (Tag Location).

enter 219. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.7 Click to place the space. for Number. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ensuring coordination between the files. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Name.

20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. select Level 3.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Using the method learned previously. enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . for Upper Limit. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and then press Esc. select Level 3. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead.7 In the Project Browser. enter Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 9 In the floor plan. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. change the space number to 216A. as shown. 10 Using the same method. double-click the space name. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Close the schedule view. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and press Enter. In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. the plan view would have updated with the changes. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Using the method learned previously. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click Training Files.rvt. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.

expand Spaces. For Number. for Name. select the space. enter 4'. select Level 3. For Offset. click in the chase area to place the space. enter Chase. Under Identity Data. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 12 Click in the section view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. right-click. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. enter 225PC. enter 0. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Limit Offset. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Element Properties. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. In the plan view. 6 Enter VG. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints.4 Press Esc. select Interior and Reference. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Roof Level. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. select Space Tag With Volume. and maximize the view. floors. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 17 Type ZF. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.Bounding elements (such as walls. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. All spaces in the view are tagged. In the next exercises. 15 Press Esc. ceilings. and click OK. under Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

click Reference. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. under Spaces. which removes the space from the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 1 In the Project Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Training Files. click View ➤ Zones. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning is highlighted. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

and verify the zones in the System Browser. Instruction 221. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. indicating that the space is occupiable. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and modify the zone properties. indicating that it’s the active view. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and click OK. and a new zone is created. you assign spaces to a zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. select Occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. As you do this. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. under Energy Analysis. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Next. under Spaces.5 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. To display space reference lines. and Electrical 220 spaces. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. click Training Files. The graphic in the System Browser updates. the Edit Zone tab displays. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click 121 Cafeteria. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The Zone tool is active. Using the Edit Zone tab. select Computer Lab 222. click Reference.

5 With the drawing area active.In the System Browser. Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. To view the zone in the drawing area. type VG. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

You activated zone visibility in the views. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.rvt. 9 In the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. click Reference. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To display space reference lines. expand 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Area B. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. for Name. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.West . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise.West . and verify the zone in the System Browser. enter 2 . under Identity Data. click Training Files. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning is highlighted. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.Zoning. indicating that it’s the active view.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning floor plan. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. zoom out. 15 Press Esc. Verify that the distance is 1/2". click in the Level 2 .Zoning view to activate it. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .

Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Front. and click OK. click the corner where the Top. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.rvt. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. for Name Value. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. enter Lounge . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.Zoning view. you verify the building. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. double-click the zone tag. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. space.East. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. on the ViewCube. and zone information.Zoning to make it the active view. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . Next. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate).4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. and select 109 Lounge. you isolate the space. Click (Highlight). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. click . and click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. For People. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. ■ ■ ■ Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 109 Lounge. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.■ On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation. and in the People dialog. click . scroll down in the left pane. select 1_South_Lounge.

Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. the zone information displays for the selected zone. cooling air temperature. and humidification set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Below the list of spaces and zones. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. roofs. and dehumidification set point. heating air temperature. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that 70. and air changes per hour. For Heating Information. verify that 74. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. floors. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 54. Next. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point. For Cooling Information.00 °F : N/A is specified. click (Shading). you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : 90. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.

15 In the Project Browser.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Level 3. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select Plenum. select Plenum. open MEP . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. Click OK.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Name. click Cancel. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 0. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). For Offset.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. On the Place tab. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verified building. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for City. select School or University. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and select space Plenum 212P. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and zone information.rvt. NH. In this exercise. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. is selected. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. verify that Manchester. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. click in the Value field. double-click Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. space. click Training Files. for Energy Data. enter 03101. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. click Edit. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. For Location. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. For Postal Code.

verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. In order to select a space. select Heated and cooled. If. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you need to select this option. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Select Area per person. enter 200 Btu/h. For People. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. For Latent. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select space Library 219. for Values. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Volume Computations. or neither. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 8 In the drawing area. For Space Type. this option adjusts the times automatically. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. and then click . and enter 50 sq. right-click. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. select Library . and click OK. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. for Building Service. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ft. verify that 1' 0" is specified. select Specified. select Specified.Audio Visual. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. and click OK. verify that Level 1 is selected. click in the Value column. For Export Complexity. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . both. For Sensible. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Sliver Space Tolerance. click Edit. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. Click OK twice. For Condition Type. verify that New Construction is selected. and click Element Properties. For Project Phase. a cooling load. For Ground Plane. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Occupiable is selected.

For Building Construction. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that <Building> is specified. select Actual. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Click OK twice. verify that Manchester. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. There should be no warnings displayed. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Building Service. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . click Information). For Electrical Loads. and under Heating Information. is specified. Under Power. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click Edit. For Location. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. You should correct the space error in the building model. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. select Actual. click Calculate. for Values. You have verified the building information.■ ■ ■ Click OK. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . NH. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and click OK. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). and click to learn the cause for the warning. and can be modified here. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 12 Click the Details tab. select 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. for Values. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that School or University is selected. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

click to the right of the building to place the legend. under Energy Analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space. Click OK. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. weather. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. select HVAC Zones. 15 Review the loads report for project. or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or zone information. 19 In the drawing area. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and zone information for the building model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 21 Click OK. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.Space Plan. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. indicating that it’s the active view. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and a loads report displays. 17 In the loads report. 16 After you review the loads report. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. For Color Scheme. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. select 219 Library. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. The new scheme displays in the view.5 Zoom in to the legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. in 1-ton increments. select Tonnage Range. select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK.

11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

For Phase. In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. for Select available fields from. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Select Schedule building components. select New Construction. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. more category options are available. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. select Spaces. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise. Click OK. For Name. click Training Files.

For Type. select Airflow Delta. select HVAC. and then select Hidden field. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ Click Calculated Value. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. For Fields.■ Under Available fields. and Blank line. For Formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Number. Click OK. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Level. Select Formula. and then click Conditional Format. enter . select Not Between. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. In the Calculated Value dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and then click . click (Browse). Header. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog. enter Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. for Formula. select Level. For Discipline. and click OK. For Then by.

and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet.■ ■ ■ For Value. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. a view opens that contains the selected space. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. click the color swatch. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. For Background Color. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Under Conditions to Use. Click OK twice. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. and click OK. verify that Show is highlighted. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the Color dialog. select red. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. ■ The schedule displays. In the next lesson. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In later exercises. right-click to access schedule properties.

78 .

In this lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will create supply air systems. 79 . After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After system creation. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. and work with the airflow schedule. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

3 In the ceiling view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and scroll to space 223.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view.

and press Enter. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then press Esc to end the command. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 9 On the Placement panel. If the host element is modified or moved.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down.Rectangular Face Round Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. select the diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. click Place on Face. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. type 12. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 17 Move the cursor down.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and select Supply Diffuser . the hosted elements are updated as well. for Flow.

29 Place 2 diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and then press Esc. select one of the diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. As you place the return diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and click Open. click Yes. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. Next. 24 In the Open dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.rfa. clear Leader. 28 On the Placement tab. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. as shown. 22 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click to select the lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 32 In the Project Browser. click Yes. Level. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click OK. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. as shown. select Strong Reference.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

44 Zoom in to space 115. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. and click OK. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 9' 0"2750.

rvt. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You then create the logical connection between the system components. When you highlight a space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. However. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.HVAC Plan . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. right-click the title. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Press Esc. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . including energy analysis.

IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 15 Click Cancel. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. On the Options Bar. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 12 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. System Name. Connect Into. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. review the Number of Elements. 11 In the drawing area. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system.

22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the system connects them. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. the air terminals are the children. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. Rename the system Next. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. for System Name. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Mechanical. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 18 Click OK. In this exercise. 25 Click OK. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.HVAC Plan. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and display solution 1. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select the upper left diffuser. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. which provides various layout tools.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . A Generate Layout tab displays. Also. click Training Files. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. In this case. for Solution Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Network. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Flex Duct Type.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. enter 3'. For Duct Type. click Modify. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 9' 10 1/2". WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. as shown. For Offset. click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. you’ll get an error in a later step. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Select Branch. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Click OK.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.11 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. For example. as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

Usually. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and click to select it. and equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. select Duct Color Fill . a disconnection exists. If the entire network does not highlight. select By View. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. highlight a segment of the main duct. under Graphics. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Values Displayed. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. but not all values are used in this view. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. fittings. Using a flow-based color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Color Scheme. and then click OK. thus it is not part of the system. The first time you press Tab. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.Flow. and click OK.

19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Schemes. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Airflow. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and on the Options Bar. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. for Flow. 20 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .Velocity. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the WSHP. and press Enter.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select the color scheme legend. select Duct Color Fill . select one of the diffusers in the system. and click OK. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 26 Click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.

and then click to select it. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight a segment of the duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. and enter . click Cancel. Select Only. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).08 in-wg/100ft. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Branch Sizing. Select Restrict Height. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and drag it to the right.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and select 16". you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. select Calculated Size Only. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Under Constraints. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.

and pressure loss.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Using this tool. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. static pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

35 Click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. indicating that it’s the active view.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click Draw Duct. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

Front.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. select 9' 10 1/2". select the top right diffuser.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. and click Draw Duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . right-click the connector grip. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 15 On the ViewCube. 11 On the Options Bar.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. it is considered a closed loop. Also.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). the color fill indicates the flow value. 22 Using the same method. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and click to select it.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection. clear Restrict Height. and click OK. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Flow.Airflow. select a segment of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. under Constraints. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 40 Using the same method. such as a plenum. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. 109 . you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model.rvt.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.

Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. in corridor 328. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Left Return . and select WSHP .Horizontal . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.2-6 Tons .High Efficiency . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. as shown.

as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 2'. and in the Type Selector. and click to place the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the WSHP is still selected.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Water Flow. Under Mechanical. Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . select the 2 WSHPs. as shown. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 12 GPM. for Offset. enter 9'.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems.21 Click Modify. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.

HVAC Plan . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems column heading.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. but without a corresponding system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.rvt. where it is easier to review the information. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Unlike logical connections (systems). indicating that it’s the active view. and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 12 In the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Notice that on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for System Name. This display indicates that the system is selected. select the 2 WSHPs. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.In the System Browser. while pressing Ctrl. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems. and the Edit System tool is not active. 10 On the Options Bar. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

You have created the hydronic return system. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. under Design ➤ HVAC . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . 17 On the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Roof . and select the cooling tower.

the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower. In cooling mode. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 29 Right-click CHWS. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). indicating the logical connection. and click Expand All. In heating mode. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. expand the Hydronic Return system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 23 Close the roof plan view. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler.22 In the Select Connector dialog. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.

31 In the Column Settings dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. under Mechanical. and click Properties. for Water Flow. and click Column Settings. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click OK.In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. you can view several parameters. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 32 In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 18 GPM. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component.

click Check None. then the Select a System dialog displays.Mech 330). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the Filter dialog.HVAC Plan . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select Mechanical Equipment. When you draw a box to select components. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). the boiler.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. press Tab to highlight the system. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design is highlighted. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to select it. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. A system preview displays in red. select CHWR. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you can place the cursor over a system component. 10 Click OK. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. enter 1' 6''. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.11 On the Options Bar. It does not reference the architecture. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. duct. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. or architectural components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. For Inset. structural beams. select Perimeter.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.16 Click Finish Layout. to display the path with thinner lines. and press Tab 3 times. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 19 In the drawing area. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 17 Optionally. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. and the flow for the other is 12. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). under Mechanical. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.

and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design. 28 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Finish Editing System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Next. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. you physically close the CHWR loop. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). which propagates flow throughout the system. the Number of Elements is now 8. Logically. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. On the Options Bar. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Edit System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Level 1 .

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. access its instance properties. 35 Using the drag control. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. under Mechanical. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.

45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. Click Settings. For Inset. select CHWS. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 0''/12''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click OK. For Slope. 41 Click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

48 While pressing Ctrl. In a later exercise. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 47 In the drawing area.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. select a different layout solution. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. To create the piping system. Add piping to close the supply loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components.

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the return pipes are magenta. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . As you work in the training file. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.

select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the plan view. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Click to specify the reference point.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view.

12 In the 3D view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 13 In the plan view. 11 In the Select Connector dialog.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click OK. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. and click Draw Pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. The connections are automatically created. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the boiler.

and you select 1 connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. and press Enter. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.7''. enter 1' . for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 2'. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view.

as shown. 19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. As you place piping runs that are close together.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the appropriate fittings are created. and select it. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 18 Press Esc twice.

29 If necessary. right-click the bottom connector. 28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. and click the minus symbol.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe.

for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 31 On the Options Bar. select the primary base mounted pump.

3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe.

you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. right-click. You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click Element Properties. Next.

and click Element Properties. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 46 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 43 Press Esc. under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. right-click. In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. the value is 0 GPM. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.50 or 50% of the Flow. for Cooling Water Flow. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. When you create the pumps in parallel. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). select the cooling tower. view the properties for the secondary pump. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). Connect the cooling tower Next. 44 In the 3D view. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. as shown.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc.

You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt. and close the dialog. When the valve is open. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design is highlighted. as shown. and select Ball Valve . 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Valves | 143 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.HVAC Plan . The bypass valve is closed by default.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . parallel to the previously placed valve.

validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. under Mechanical. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 19 Using the same method. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 145 . and click Element Properties. right-click. and click OK. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. In heating mode. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.Design is highlighted. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Initially. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.

Flow.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill .Size. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. and enter 2. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And. Click OK. enter 5 FPS. and click to select the branch. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Under Constraints.25 FT/100ft. 13 Press Esc.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.rvt. pressure. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. or manually modify the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. Using the System Inspector. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. click Training Files. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System | 149 . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.

The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as required. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. This information helps you modify the system design.

89 psi. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 10 Click Finish. In this exercise. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .67 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and to size pipe. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 9 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.88 psi. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. the Static Pressure is 7. as shown. targeting those systems that need attention. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 90° F. and click OK.

These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you have assigned all components to systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and for pipe sizing. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. click Training Files. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and double-click Level 3 . 6 In the Project Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. double-click Level 1 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 4 In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.HVAC Plan .rvt. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 7 In the System Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design. right-click the Systems titlebar. and click View. Warnings display. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. the pipe is associated with that system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. After you assign components to a system. In the System Browser. For example. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. As you learned when placing components.

Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return. click Close. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 12 In the System Browser. otherwise. and select Level 3 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 Using the same methods.HVAC Plan . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 13 Right-click CHWR. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Expand All.Design floor plan. expand the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

enter THHN. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select 90. select Copper. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and demand factors that are applied in the design. click (Open). 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.rvt. enter 1. select Wiring Types. For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Click OK. For Temperature Rating. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. distribution systems. expand Wiring . ■ ■ For Factor. For Temperature. Select Correction Factor. click Training Files. select 75. speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. As you place components and create circuits. ■ ■ For Material. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. wiring. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.04. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Wire Sizes.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click Background Color.■ ■ For Value. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

First. power circuits. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. 167 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Balance wire sizes and breaker service.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. Then. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

select the color legend. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for the Spaces Category. click Training Files. Under Scheme Definition. select Average Estimated Illumination. select the color for Less Than 20. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 2 In the drawing area. for Basic Colors. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the Color dialog. By using orange as the color for this range. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You can create additional color schemes. select Orange.rvt. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .00 fc. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. click (Open).

10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.277. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. zoom to space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.7 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range. 13 Click the Level 2 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. which is the lowest value in the specified range.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .

20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. the fixtures will move accordingly. select Multiple. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar. 18 Click to place the fixture. 23 Click OK. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select Lighting Fixtures.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. Click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

42 In the drawing area.277V. The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment.

The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files.45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click Training Files. In the next exercise. click (Open).

Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 2 Tile the views as shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219.

In the Name dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.00 VA. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter . click the value for Light Loss Factor.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Under Electrical. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select T5 [HO]. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Click OK. specify 15000.93. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics.85. for Color Preset. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter . for Type Mark.00 lm. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color.ies and click Open. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux. enter 162. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.277V and click OK. for Lamp. select 463T5_S. for Apparent Load. and click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Photometrics. enter F15.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures.277V. Click OK. click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .

15 In space Library 219. select the top center fixture.Press Delete. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the next exercise. you add switches. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. Placing Switches. click Training Files. and Receptacles | 183 . The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and receptacles to your design. junction boxes. Junction Boxes.rvt.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

The element type Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Level 2 . for Mark. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter JB-1NL. zoom to space Library 219. Under Electrical. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click OK twice. In the Type Properties dialog. enter 9’0”. 15 Select the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE When entering values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type.14 Press ESC to end the command. 21 In the drawing area.Offset.

Expand General. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. 24 For any column. and Voltage. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Placing Switches. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. and Receptacles | 187 . NOTE If necessary. Junction Boxes. Select Size. Click OK.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 23 In the System Browser. Select Load. Space Number. Distribution System. right-click and click Column Settings.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click Training Files. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and work toward the higher voltage. click (Open).

8 Select the panelboard. enter 20. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A. 15 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. Click OK.

zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter LP-2B. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter 20. for Max. and for Category. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. 23 In the Filter dialog. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None. Click OK.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

41 In the Filter dialog. enter 2. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and for Category.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. except without wire. select Wires. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK.Loads. Click OK.

and then expand circuit 1. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Voltage. 2 In the drawing area. Expand Electrical. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. expand Power. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Distribution System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i.rvt. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. click Training Files. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 In the System Browser. and verify that Load. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Rating. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.

The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical.

43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. enter FR4. 40 Click OK twice. click Edit Type. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK. Click Yes.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. for Type Mark. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Tags. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 35 Press ESC to end the command. click below the first one to place it. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 52 In the Save As dialog. and click Apply. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. For Circuit Number.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click Save. click Check None. and for Category. for File Name.rfa. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 56 In the Filter dialog. enter a comma. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Click OK. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tags.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. for Switch ID. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.rvt. Creating a Switch System | 205 . under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK.Lighting. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.

6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select Electrical Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. and for Category. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click (Open). Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . lighting.rvt. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space.26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Filter dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Circuits are used for power. and data systems.

rfa. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Element Properties. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 19 Click OK. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. under Electrical . Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Wiring. enter 2. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 13 Select the wire again. for Hot Conductors. select Long Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.Loads.

22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . as shown. in space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area.

on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.rvt. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 3 In the Electrical space. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. Next you balance the loads for your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 2 In the drawing area. click Open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. select panel LP-2B. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. zoom to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.

Phase B 3636 VA. and Phase C . while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#10. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 1-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10.3712 VA. 6 Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties.3616 VA). Under Electrical-Loads. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. for Rating. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 30A. 1-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 12 Select panel PP-2B. Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Scroll down. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog.

Loads. enter 25A. Select PP-2B.Loads. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 30A. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. under Electrical . click (Open). The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Training Files. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.rvt. 17 Close the warning dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Rating. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . for Rating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Click OK. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK.

Next you use the System Browser to check your design. enter 1/8. Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. 7 Select the schedule. Under Body Text. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Font. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Edit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click (Open). for Appearance. 11 Click OK twice. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. select Berlin Sans FB. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Font Size. 4 Close the report. under Other. for Font Size.rvt. 5 In the Project Browser. and open E601 . drag PP-2B onto the sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. expand Sheets (all). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 6 In the Project Browser.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. click Training Files. enter 3/32. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. each with a load of 180VA. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. In the System Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Expand Unassigned. select space Lounge 212. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 18 Select panel LP-2C.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. for Panel. select MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. 16 Close the details dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

2 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you create a PVC pipe type. and verify that Level 1 . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and click Properties.Sanitary.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. type PVC . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Duplicate. In this exercise. 219 . in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Vent. right-click PVC . In this lesson.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. planning is critical to a successful design.rvt.

For Offset. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Pipe Settings. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 15 For System Type. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . In the Project Browser.rfa. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Plastic. Tee. under Mechanical. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . click Training Files. 17 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Tee. Cross. 6 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 27 For the new pipe size. enter 27/32''. and click OK. for Nominal. enter 1/2''.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Tee Vent . 26 Click OK.Sch 40 . PVC . select None.DWV. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 For Inside Diameter. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 25 For Outside.PVC .PVC . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 13 In the right panel. and click Main. select Branch. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.0''. select Sanitary. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 10°. click Modify. Tap. enter -4' . enter 5/8''.DWV: Standard. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 18 For System Type.PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 22 Click New Size. select Sanitary. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 21 In the right pane.Vent is listed. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 10 On the Selection panel. under Pipe Types.Sch 40 . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. for Material.

Create the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . vent. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. sanitary piping. Create the cold water system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add 2 toilets.Plumbing Plan .rvt. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. including the men’s room (space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 1 urinal.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. NOTE To identify a space name and number. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. as shown. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

and 3 sinks. 4 On the Element panel.1.Wall Mounted. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.Flush Valve . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . select Public . as shown. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.6 gpf. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 1 wall-mounted urinal.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. against the left wall. in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 5 On the Placement panel.

Wall Hung. zoom in closer. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.7 Click to place another toilet. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.) 8 Press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. use the reference line to center the fixture. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Urinal . (Again. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Placement panel. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).2'' Drain. under Floor Drain . select 5''x5'' Strainer . 14 Click Modify. In placing the fixture.Rectangular. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. click Place on Face.

19 Expand Default Sanitary. and a floor drain. In this exercise.rvt. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and click View ➤ Piping. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 Expand the Unassigned folder.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and review the components listed under this system. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. click Training Files. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. a urinal. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. 8 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing Plan . starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 6 In the plan view. and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 In the Project Browser.

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. expand Sanitary. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. If you deselected the drain. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. so the Create Sanitary System is available. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 11 On the Options Bar. enter Sanitary 107. 13 In the Systems Browser. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. click Finish Editing System. for System Name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel.

for example. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select Sanitary 107. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

enter -1' 0''. 26 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Main. The default settings are automatically modified. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -1' 0''. 27 Click Modify. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. select 4''. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Offset. and click Settings. and click OK. and for Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Slope. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. enter -4'-0”. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Solution Type. 23 For Offset. select Branch. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 31 Click Modify.

click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Rectangular. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. under Lavatory . as shown. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan .Public.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. For example. TIP When entering dimensions.7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. select Multiple.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 16 On the Edit System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 In the System Browser. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Press Esc.

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.In the System Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . double-click 3D Plumbing. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 20 Select the fitting. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 19 In the 3D view. 21 Select the tee. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. use the ViewCube to orient the view. with the tee fitting selected. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view.

enter 1/8'' / 12''. press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. In this example.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .6''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. enter 2' . for Offset. and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply.

move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 . 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting.

and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 34 Press Esc.33 With the fitting selected. on the Options Bar. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. enter 1'. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. enter 6''. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view.

as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 41 Using the same method. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

right-click the bottom connector. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify. 46 In the section view. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 6''. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc.

52 In the plan view. under Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left.PVC . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . 53 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method.

enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 58 Using the same method. and press Enter. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .. Click Modify. select the left P-Trap. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Press Esc. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. click Finish to select the recommended solution. as shown. On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .

you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. for Slope.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. adjusting the sanitary stack.

Sch 40 .PVC .Design. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click Draw Pipe.DWV. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the vertical stack. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 7 On the Selection panel. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Floor level line. as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Overall. select Standard. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select the tee. 3 In the Section view. and click to draw the pipe.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . right-click the top connector. 10 In the 3D view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Plumbing Plan .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.

14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 12 Select the fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. for Offset. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. 13 Click the rotate control once.Sch 40 . as shown. enter 1'-0”. 18 In the plan view. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.PVC . select Standard. under Plug . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 15 Press Esc.11 Click Modify.

rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. and verify that Level 1 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .19 Click Modify. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. click Training Files.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. and click OK. if necessary. 6 In the left pane.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Pipe Types: Water. for System Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Domestic Hot Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design ➤ 3D Views. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. for System Type. select Domestic Cold Water. and click Main. select Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the left pane. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. minimize the Sanitary system. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Branch. select Branch. select Plumbing Fixtures. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. enter 9' 3''. and for System Type. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Overall. 14 In the System Browser. 15 In the plan view. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . 7 In the left pane. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. click Check None. 4 In the right pane. expand Unassigned. urinal. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 17 In the Filter dialog. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. and sinks.) 10 Click OK. For Offset. select Main. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that the value is 9' 0''. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

click Finish Editing System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel. In the System Browser. 21 On the Edit System panel. enter DCW 107. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. For Flow Conversion Method. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .

select 3/4''. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. for Offset. connect the second toilet. select Water. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 0”/12”. enter 4'0”. 35 In the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top DCW connector. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 3' . and click to place the pipe. enter 10'. under Pipe Types. and press Enter. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. at the intersection of the water main pipe. as shown. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. 33 Click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. for Offset. 28 In the Type Selector.25 Using the same method. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. For Offset. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. For Slope. 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 34 In the plan view. 37 On the Options Bar. as shown. enter 7''. select the sink above the urinal.2 7/8''. and click the connector. click to the left of the urinal.

39 Move the cursor to the left. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 41 Select the top sink. and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 40 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. you create the hot water system. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

6 In the plan view. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand the Unassigned folder. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. while pressing Ctrl.Plumbing Plan . select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. and verify that Level 1 .Overall. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.

12 In the Type Selector.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. for System Name. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. in the Unassigned folder. 13 In the plan view. and click Edit System. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 10 In the System Browser. Default Domestic Hot Water. as shown.Tankless. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). under Water Heater . 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 15 In the System Browser. When designing systems. select 0. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.6 Gallon. In later steps. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. Default Domestic Cold Water. 14 Click Modify. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

21 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 22 In the Type Selector. as shown. and on the Edit System panel.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select Draw Pipe. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 26 Move the cursor to the right. 25 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 24 Move the cursor up. and click the water main line. 27 Click Modify. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. right-click the middle left connector. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater. Slope: 0''/12''. enter 10’. 19 Select the water heater. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

enter 9' 0''. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select 4'-6''. click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Edit System. as shown. and for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and press Enter. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 36 Move the cursor down. 33 On the Edit System panel. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Diameter. select a sink. enter 1''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and in the System Selector. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. for Offset. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify. enter 1’. for Offset. and press Enter. as shown.

43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 267 . In this tutorial. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. However. go to http://www. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. click Training Files. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. After finishing each exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and click Duplicate. You create a new pipe type.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present.

The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. structural beams. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Carbon Steel. For Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and then click OK. and click Properties. For Offset. For System Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. In the left pane. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. click Rename. for Material. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. under Mechanical. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Main. duct. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. In this exercise. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 9' 0" is selected. In the next exercise. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you modify the type properties of the pipe. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Fire Protection Wet. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Offset. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For Pipe Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. However. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 6 In the Project Browser. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces.Design is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. right-click. Under Categories. and click Element Properties. under Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . For Group parameter under. 5 Click OK twice.Fire Protection Plan . When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Add. click Training Files. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display. enter Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name.rvt. 8 Using a crossing window. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select the upper half of the building. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 In the drawing area.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. including a calculated value parameter. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties.rvt. 13 Using the same method. and click OK. enter Zone 2.

11 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Schedule keys. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK. enter Maximum Spacing. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1'. enter Protection Area Construction Type. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Maximum Spacing. select Length.Fire Protection Plan . 14 Select the new header. For Units. double-click on each column separator. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. The schedule displays. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. enter Light. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Name. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Key name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Rounding.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Add Parameter. select Feet and fractional inches. for Name. 9 On the Formatting tab. click the Formatting tab. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. indicating that it’s the active view. and on the ribbon. For Type of Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible. enter 15. Click OK. For Group parameter under. 6 Using the same method. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and click Field Format.

Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Click OK. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Ordinary. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. select Spaces. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. under Available fields. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.

under Other. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. for Sort by. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. In the Fields dialog. select Common. select Fixed. select Level. and click View Properties. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. click . select Area. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click Field Format. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. click Edit. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Then by. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Number. For Units. For Type. Click OK. For Discipline. select 0 decimal place. For Rounding. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click OK. For Formula.

For Fields. click Edit. ■ In the Format dialog. select Number. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Minimum Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. For Fields. For Then by (second instance). and then click Field Format. and click View Properties. select Level. and then select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. for Filter. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. At the bottom of the dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Hidden field. select Grand totals.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting. for Filter by. 27 In the drawing area. verify that Use default settings is selected. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and select Totals only.

use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Calculate totals. On the Formatting tab. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and click View Properties. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Sprinklers. for Available fields. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and select Totals only. For Category. for Fields. double-click Type. Under Field formatting. under Other. select Embedded Schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Grand totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Embedded Schedule. System Name. and Count. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule.

select Light. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. but their values are not determined. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. 44 In the schedule.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. double-click FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. and click OK. 52 Click OK. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 50 Access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. 46 With the space still selected. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Ordinary. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 48 In the floor plan. and access the instance properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select space 221 Instruction. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. methodology.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you can choose to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. 279 . By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. After finishing each exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and double-click Level 2 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you create the system. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. click Training Files.

After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. select the sprinklers that you placed. 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and select Sprinkler .Pendent . as shown.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.

Next.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Also. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

For Number. you place non-hosted sprinklers. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. for Offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Notice that the schedule updates. open Design ➤ FP . 17 In the Project Browser. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 19 In the floor plan. and 200C).Fire Protection Plan . enter 14' 6". and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. you adjust the offset. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Type WT. enter 11. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 29 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. move the cursor to the right. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This number is determined in the schedule. 200B. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 10' 6". 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.FP_Ceiling view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and press Enter.Design. 25 Click OK. under Constraints. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Next. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. specify a vertical offset.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. However. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In this exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. After creating the logical connection.30 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In the next exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems).Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files. and with piping (physical connection). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).rvt. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.

6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. within the Piping Systems folder. In the System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. as shown. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and select Piping. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.

The Edit Piping System panel displays. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Next. In the left pane. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. enter FP Wet_Zone2. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and click Select. indicating the logical connection. 13 In the System Browser. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Pipe Type. select an initial piping layout. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. system equipment. click Settings.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. press Tab. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. For Offset. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and a piping layout preview displays. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and number of elements in the system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 19 Click OK. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.Wet is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 In the drawing area. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and select the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 12 On the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. for System Name. select Branch. and on the Options Bar. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. verify that 9' 0" is specified. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. providing system editing tools. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.

and select solution 5. click Solutions. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Place Base. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). as shown. verify that Network is selected. 23 For Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and green represents branch lines). select 2". Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. When the layout is finished. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0".

as shown. A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click Modify. On the Generate Layout panel.

33 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. and then you create piping to physically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. Next. select a different layout solution. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.

indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 If necessary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.rvt.Fire Protection Plan . and select the elbow fitting as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design is highlighted.

7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 14 Close the System Browser. 13 Click Finish Layout. 8 In the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 5 In the drawing area. and select solution 5. mechanical equipment. you can select the pipe or duct. 12 On the Options Bar. radiators. verify that Solutions is selected. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. or a system component to display system tools. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit System panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. for Solution Type.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. click Add To System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. verify that Network is selected. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and pipe or duct is created. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select 9'. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the views. 25 Select the sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .20 Open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 28 In the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then press Esc. right-click. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

indicating that it’s the active view.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . ■ 6 Press Esc. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4". for Diameter.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

The pipe diameter is modified. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and then tag the piping as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 23 Close the 3D view.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. for Diameter.

In this exercise. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You added tags to pipes. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . create details. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. and apply a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. dependent views. 2 In the Project Browser. matchlines. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Properties. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 307 . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and view references. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Rename. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. views and put them on the sheet. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 3 In the Rename View dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and click Apply Default View Template. click Training Files. 4 Using the same method. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. as shown.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. more focused. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click OK. 10 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and then press Esc. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Rename. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. create dependent views for areas B and C.

select black. for Target view. and then press Esc.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Weight. and click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 13 Press Esc twice. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click the current value. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the Color dialog. select Double Dash 5/8". select 11. 19 In the drawing area./ ---). 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. on the Options Bar. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 20 Select the upper view reference and. 21 Using the same method. For Line Pattern.

drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. as shown. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 25 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references.

Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Sub-Discipline. right-click 3D Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser. and select the section box. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in. select Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. select Documentation. and click to select it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Default View Template. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click OK. for View Classification. Under Graphics. and click Properties. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Domestic Water. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. select Plumbing Isometric. for View Name.rvt. click Training Files. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.

10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 12 Using the same method. select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select Dash. press Tab 3 times. Click Apply. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click to select it. For Pattern.9 Right-click.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. In the drawing area.Domestic Water view with detailing.15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 18 Using methods learned previously. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. you use a plan view to create a callout view. click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views | 315 . select To the nearest 1/8". 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. For Slope. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. 21 Click OK twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. verify that Common is selected. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.

click Training Files. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating that it’s the active view. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.rvt. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. for Scale. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag it to the sheet.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. under Sheets (all). double-click M601 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter WSHP PART PLAN. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. and select the viewport. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template. for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Names. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

and annotation to create a legend. symbols. 321 . duct tags. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. linetypes. ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. click Training Files. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and a segment of rectangular duct. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 323 . verify that Leader is cleared. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct. and then click Right Straight. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.9 Press Esc twice.

tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. for Ducts. under Category. If necessary. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.rfa. and click Open. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click OK. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Load. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 On the Options Bar.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area.25 In the drawing area. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 26 On the Options Bar. as shown. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Creating Annotations | 325 . and Attached End.

select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar.

Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. select the last tag placed. not simply an instance property. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. That’s because you changed a type property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 40 Using the method learned previously. 37 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and lock lighting fixtures. lay out. select Dot Open 1/16". 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and all elements of that type are affected. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. select the dimension line. 12 Press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. click Training Files. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar.rvt. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.

Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. annotation symbols. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 19 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. enter 8'. and notes.13 Using the same method. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.3 1/2"). click the 3 interior locks on the line. linework. Creating a Legend | 329 . Because the dimensions are locked. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and offset them 8' from the wall. 16 Press Esc. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter.

select Floor Plan.rvt. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. For Scale.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the drawing area. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click Training Files. click below the title to place the diffuser. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1/4" = 1' -0". Click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . enter Diffuser Legend. For View. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Creating a Legend | 331 . and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. The selected detail lines are now thin. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 21 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 34 Using the method learned previously. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. Creating a Legend | 333 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 335 . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.Detailing 15 In this lesson. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.113 East elevation view. detail groups. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. A detail callout that references another view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and text. A drafting view using detail components.

Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar.113 East on the sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 8 Using the same method. and click to place it.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Next. select each of the 2 panelboards. place Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then modify and align the views.

Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Activate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click OK. 13 Right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. right-click.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 22 Press Esc. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. In the next exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Activate View. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click.

2 Close the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . As you draw. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . for Line Weight. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . expand Lines. as shown. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Name. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. In the New Subcategory dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Modify Subcategories. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. notice that there are no snaps active. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. verify that Chain is selected. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. In the Line Styles dialog.113 North view. click New.rvt. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Electrical Power.

enter 1/8".10 Press Esc. for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 11 Using the same method.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify.

33 On the Options Bar. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

You enter exact values for each line length. and then press Esc. enter 3/32". for Offset. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 0 0. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 40 Press Esc.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. for Name. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.125. Press Esc. click on the length dimension value. select all 3 lines. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter 0 0. and click OK. you can ensure that they stay together. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. and press Enter.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter Ground. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 46 In the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. Using the same method. while pressing Ctrl.25. and then press Esc.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.51 Using the method learned previously. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. TP-2B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

3 In the Rename View dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. In later exercises.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click Rename. 5 Zoom in to view the section. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK. click Training Files. 2 Right-click the copy. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.rvt. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. Under Names. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Walkthroughs. select 3D Views. Click OK.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. 15 Using the same method. 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.To rotate and reposition a text label. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. as shown. and under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 25 Click OK. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

click Training Files. Place a detail component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.29 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. For Scale. select the isometric view. Click OK. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. right-click the view name.

14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 12 On the Element panel. For View Classification. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain. as shown. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. 13 In the drawing area. Click OK. as the rectangle start point. for Sub-Discipline.

and then press Esc. (Line). select C. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 20 Select 1.P. 22 Click Modify. for Type. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 21 In the drawing area. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. and click OK.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. Concrete. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.I. select the filled region. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 18 With the filled region still selected.

and then click point 6 as the endpoint. select Multiple. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

as shown. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then press Esc. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Click Finish Region.

51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. draw wide detail lines as shown. for Name.D. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. select the Flashing Membrane group. 52 In the Create Group dialog.. and then click to select them. as shown. 49 Click Modify. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify.62 Press Esc twice. as shown. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. and then click OK. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 64 Press Esc twice. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 72 If necessary.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the second leader point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 90 Press Esc. select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. open P103 . and then press Esc twice.

double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Visible. select Black and White. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. click Training Files.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select Auto-Detect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you import a CAD detail drawing. Click Open. For Layers. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Import units. for Line Weight. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.dwg. For Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. For A-----NPP. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select 3.rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Press Esc.8 Type ZF. and then press Esc. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful